tap & hold the screen to show the top bar · adriana mendez adriana laura mendez is a jewelry...

106

Upload: others

Post on 14-Sep-2020

0 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Tap amp Hold the screen to show the top bar

HOME Tap to return to the app home page

How to

use this

app

Tap amp Hold the screen to show the top bar

Swipe Horizontally to quickly navigate pagesTap selected page to View

Swipe

Horizontally

to go to the

next page

EDITORrsquoS NOTE

FEATURED JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS

bull Caged Cabachon Earrings by Sky Aldovino

bull Introduction to the Peruvian Point by

Adriana Mendez

bull Wire Crochet Ring by Adriana Mendez

bull RECOMMENDED JEWELRY MAKING SUPPLIES

FEATURED JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS

bull Wire Wrapped Earrings by Kornelia

Kubinowska

bull Pearl Bangle by Irene Adler

bull Double Helix Earrings by Danielle

Lewandowski

bull Edelweiss Pendant by Joanna Kun

CONTENTS

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

CONTENTS

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

FEATURED ARTICLE

bull Wire Wrapped Beauties

JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS

bull Lucky Stud Earrings by Sky Aldovino

bull Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet by

Carolyn Conley

RECOMMENDED READINGS

bull Wire Wrapping The Basics And Beyond

bull A Beginners Guide to Wire Wrapping

bull Fine Art Wire Weaving

bull Wirework wDVD

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Blog wwwhandmade-jewelry-clubcom

Membership wwwdiyjewelrymakingcom

Join The Fun

In this months issue we bring to you beautiful wire

jewelry tutorials for you to have fun with wires

Wirework and wire wrapping is known to be one of the

oldest methods to make handmade jewelry When

making wire jewelry you dont need a lot of materials

because only wire is the main material but having the

right tools is essential to make wire jewelry a fun

experience Have some fun with these wire jewelry

tutorials today

Editorrsquos Note

Welcome to DIY Jewelry Making

Jane Chew

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads

The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon

Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers

Skill Level- Beginner

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers

Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon

Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral

Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon

Side view

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon

Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side

Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft

The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh

Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split

9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)

It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)

Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 2: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

EDITORrsquoS NOTE

FEATURED JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS

bull Caged Cabachon Earrings by Sky Aldovino

bull Introduction to the Peruvian Point by

Adriana Mendez

bull Wire Crochet Ring by Adriana Mendez

bull RECOMMENDED JEWELRY MAKING SUPPLIES

FEATURED JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS

bull Wire Wrapped Earrings by Kornelia

Kubinowska

bull Pearl Bangle by Irene Adler

bull Double Helix Earrings by Danielle

Lewandowski

bull Edelweiss Pendant by Joanna Kun

CONTENTS

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

CONTENTS

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

FEATURED ARTICLE

bull Wire Wrapped Beauties

JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS

bull Lucky Stud Earrings by Sky Aldovino

bull Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet by

Carolyn Conley

RECOMMENDED READINGS

bull Wire Wrapping The Basics And Beyond

bull A Beginners Guide to Wire Wrapping

bull Fine Art Wire Weaving

bull Wirework wDVD

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Blog wwwhandmade-jewelry-clubcom

Membership wwwdiyjewelrymakingcom

Join The Fun

In this months issue we bring to you beautiful wire

jewelry tutorials for you to have fun with wires

Wirework and wire wrapping is known to be one of the

oldest methods to make handmade jewelry When

making wire jewelry you dont need a lot of materials

because only wire is the main material but having the

right tools is essential to make wire jewelry a fun

experience Have some fun with these wire jewelry

tutorials today

Editorrsquos Note

Welcome to DIY Jewelry Making

Jane Chew

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads

The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon

Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers

Skill Level- Beginner

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers

Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon

Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral

Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon

Side view

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon

Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side

Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft

The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh

Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split

9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)

It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)

Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 3: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

CONTENTS

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

FEATURED ARTICLE

bull Wire Wrapped Beauties

JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS

bull Lucky Stud Earrings by Sky Aldovino

bull Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet by

Carolyn Conley

RECOMMENDED READINGS

bull Wire Wrapping The Basics And Beyond

bull A Beginners Guide to Wire Wrapping

bull Fine Art Wire Weaving

bull Wirework wDVD

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Blog wwwhandmade-jewelry-clubcom

Membership wwwdiyjewelrymakingcom

Join The Fun

In this months issue we bring to you beautiful wire

jewelry tutorials for you to have fun with wires

Wirework and wire wrapping is known to be one of the

oldest methods to make handmade jewelry When

making wire jewelry you dont need a lot of materials

because only wire is the main material but having the

right tools is essential to make wire jewelry a fun

experience Have some fun with these wire jewelry

tutorials today

Editorrsquos Note

Welcome to DIY Jewelry Making

Jane Chew

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads

The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon

Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers

Skill Level- Beginner

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers

Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon

Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral

Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon

Side view

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon

Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side

Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft

The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh

Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split

9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)

It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)

Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 4: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Blog wwwhandmade-jewelry-clubcom

Membership wwwdiyjewelrymakingcom

Join The Fun

In this months issue we bring to you beautiful wire

jewelry tutorials for you to have fun with wires

Wirework and wire wrapping is known to be one of the

oldest methods to make handmade jewelry When

making wire jewelry you dont need a lot of materials

because only wire is the main material but having the

right tools is essential to make wire jewelry a fun

experience Have some fun with these wire jewelry

tutorials today

Editorrsquos Note

Welcome to DIY Jewelry Making

Jane Chew

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads

The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon

Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers

Skill Level- Beginner

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers

Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon

Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral

Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon

Side view

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon

Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side

Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft

The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh

Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split

9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)

It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)

Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 5: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads

The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon

Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers

Skill Level- Beginner

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers

Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon

Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral

Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon

Side view

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon

Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side

Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft

The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh

Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split

9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)

It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)

Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 6: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers

Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon

Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral

Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon

Side view

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon

Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side

Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft

The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh

Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split

9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)

It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)

Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 7: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon

Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side

Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft

The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh

Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split

9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)

It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)

Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 8: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Caged Cabachon Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft

The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh

Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split

9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)

It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)

Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 9: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft

The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh

Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split

9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)

It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)

Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 10: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility

Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are

AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)

How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook

The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 11: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes

00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM

Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required

ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 12: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Introduction to the Peruvian Point

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 13: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm

The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)

Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it

passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb

The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left

B) CHAINSteps 1

Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 14: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet

introducing it to the thickest part

Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right

pass the wire over it to be pulled

Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the

point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb

Pull the wire to form the point

Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the

thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle

Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to

set the point

Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the

crochet hook to the beginning of the next point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 15: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 8Start the next point

Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take

the wire out and place it below the needle

Step 10Pull the wire to form the point

Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet

needle to the larger diameter portion

Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree

angle to adjust the point

Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to

weave the following point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 16: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the

right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point

Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length

Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue

teaching the Peruvian Point

Here is a detailed step by step

Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 17: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 2Join the first point to the last point

Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop

Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point

Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest

diameter for the point and we round it

Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first

high point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 18: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet

from right to left ready to pull the increase

Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to

mark the ring

Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are

called low points

Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to

generate the diameter and rounding

Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge

of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 19: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move

forward we round it We have our second high point

Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will

call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has

been woven

Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points

Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we

will only weave the high points

Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)

- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 20: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit

bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires

The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the

weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of

our ring width in this case it is 5 rings

From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up

Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock

it

Pass the wire under the crochet

Pull the loop

The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian

Point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 21: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire

Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point

When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point

Pass the loop under the crochet needle

Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally

Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the

others help lock it with your finger

Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row

Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 22: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein

Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points

The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet

Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle

Pass the wire under the crochet needle

Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 23: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length

To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring

(I have 5 rings on each side)

Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row

With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections

And we sew the crystals chosen for design

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 24: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Crochet Ring

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Adriana Mendez

Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry

Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks

Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 25: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and

brilliance in top fashion colors

Featured Jewelry Making Supplies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting

jewelry and bead-weaving designs

Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a

smooth finish

Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for

uniform precision work

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 26: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining

Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 27: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking

At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire

You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves

must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers

Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring

Mine has been made out of 11 loops

Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long

Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it

together with the ring as much as 3 times

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 28: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads

You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the

spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like

(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too

Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the

ring

Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring

Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready

I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 29: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Wrapped Earrings

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Kornelia Kubinowska

My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 30: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm

Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 31: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire

Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking

On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point

Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 32: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Make by two wraps on each wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other

and two wraps on three wires together

Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right

point

and pressed flat to base wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 33: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck

the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The result of Step 2

Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet

Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo

There is circle of base

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 34: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire number 2 make one loop

Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1

Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3

and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection

All spirals hammering on the bench block

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 35: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

That is the top part of bracelet

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle

Step 5Decorate bangle with beads

Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and

No2

With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times

on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave

String the 4mm bead

With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 36: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

String 5-8 mm bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on

loops side trim and tuck the end

Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire

wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)

String the bead on two 26-gauge wires

Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part

In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 37: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Weaving the right part from blue bead

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle

You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 38: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Pearl Bangle

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Irene Adler

I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers

Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 39: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings

Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)

Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 40: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture

Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown

With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)

Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 41: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction

Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire

Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece

Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire

Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 42: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece

Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown

Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)

Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up

Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 43: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires

Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire

Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires

Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 44: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape

Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)

This is what your piece should look like so far

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 45: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires

Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire

This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece

Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now

Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 46: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)

Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front

Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown

Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 47: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown

Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire

Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position

Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 48: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

This is what your earrings should look like now

Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings

Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 49: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Double Helix Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Danielle Lewandowski

Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be

My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out

Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful

Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 50: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering

MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm

OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing

with this kind of product- fine steel wool

OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 51: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead

The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular

STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of

masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet

Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You

need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet

STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It

wonrsquot be visible

NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 52: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1

mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose

pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it

with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project

Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers

You are going to make the same number of bends on each side

The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire

NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical

more it seems to be natural and unique

STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you

have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make

the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the

remaining tails will be of the similar length

STEP 7OPTIONAL

Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit

NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the

structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)

sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 53: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the

middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal

Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not

to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are

twisting

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work

keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling

You will fill petals in clockwise direction

Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place

NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in

the opposite direction

STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over

the left wire and back up underneath the right wire

Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left

wire

STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the

herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo

Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 54: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the

wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept

under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times

STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if

necessary

STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished

STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the

floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the

remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals

NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less

as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 55: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm

(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and

continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps

STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the

previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)

STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the

beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure

the pendant hook

STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any

adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower

STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends

meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not

necessary

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 56: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it

breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below

shows how the wire should pass through

STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made

too close to each other

STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut

it off

STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to

cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads

STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as

shown on the photo

NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is

shown Each time you cross the wire below pull

the wire towards the center of the flower

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 57: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the

circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through

While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off

the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail

STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base

When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire

Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers

STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at

the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails

STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the

future hook onto the back of the pendant yet

NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made

is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 58: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round

nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant

Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest

STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third

wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the

oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it

STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the

wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use

are takenLet the piece dry off

STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a

spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish

from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing

cloth

STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by

coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will

not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant

are visible therefore they need adjustment

Your pendant is ready

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 59: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you

understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like

For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire

for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08

mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick

better to the stud

MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to

chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper

Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while

polishing

Some inspiration

HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You

should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice

IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before

making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density

of your weaving

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 60: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace

For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to

make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving

Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below

First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make

and fix an earring post like shown

Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file

HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE

The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their

length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press

the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 61: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops

on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow

Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks

to the base

This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like

securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver

beds

Here you can see a piece already finished

I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier

Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need

MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)

TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 62: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900

degrees and will not anneal the metal

STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)

It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts

NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching

them in the cold water

STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it

for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while

The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough

Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and

enough (if not the wire temper will vary)

STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a

recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool

to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame

If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area

If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 63: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can

harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a

tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid

NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of

pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough

NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too

The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more

Your wire is ready for further work

STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool

especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at

once

Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 64: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Edelweiss Pendant

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Joanna Kun

My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique

Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )

I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies

Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 65: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can

never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on

Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these

wrapped around your wrists

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman

by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic

Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I

by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 66: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Wire Wrapped Beauties

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

by GearsFactory

by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone

Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 67: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs

The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern

If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue

Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel

Skill LevelIntermediate

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 68: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again

Do the same with the other wire

Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides

Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape

Side view

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 69: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl

Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark

Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round

Set aside

and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times

Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 70: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair

Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 71: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Lucky Stud Earrings

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Sky Aldovino

I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 72: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 73: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5

loops Remove the business card

The supplies make one piece of Viking knit

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 74: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end

making a bunch

Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end

Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod

Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 75: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod

Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way

Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take

the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 76: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the

bottom of the loop

Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you

will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13

rows of loops

Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom

of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row

Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped

prongs down

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 77: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole

I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire

cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit

Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long

Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is

finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 78: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of

your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)

You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice

Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod

Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of

the dowel rod

Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 79: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the

bead cap

Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry

Love Knot Chainmaille

Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos

Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies

Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 80: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1

Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots

Step 2

Your love knot chainmaille is finished

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 81: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven

Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening

Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long

Step-by-Step photos with instructions

This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger

adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces

The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot

Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle

Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 82: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo

18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger

opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap

Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc

bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x

Swarovski crystal bead

Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to

the 3mm silver ball bead

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 83: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap

Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside

Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the

wire end around the wire about 2 times

Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring

through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet

Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 84: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring

Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the

toggle

Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring

Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring

Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 85: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet

BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

About the Author

Carolyn Conley

Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)

Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 86: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wire Wrapping The Basics

And Beyond

This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 87: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

A Beginners Guide to Wire

Wrapping

Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 88: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Fine Art Wire Weaving

Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 89: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005

Rec

omm

end

ed R

ead

ings

Wirework wDVD

Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction

BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM

Page 90: Tap & Hold the screen to show the top bar · Adriana Mendez Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate about the world of fashion and jewelry. In 2005